null User manual

null  User manual
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Cargo Van
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
tions.
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to support. For service issues, contact your authorized
body modifications or special equipment installed by dealer.
van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders.
Refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac- the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
turer.
INTRODUCTION 7
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor- NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .17
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ When To Reset Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . .32
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . .
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start . . . . . .33
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
▫ Cancel Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
. . . . . .43
. . . . . .43
. . . . . .44
. . . . . .49
. . . . . .50
. . . . . .54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .105
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .78
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch 1 — OFF
2 — ACCESSORY
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
2
Emergency Key Removal
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
WARNING! (Continued)
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
position.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Replacement Keys
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
CAUTION!
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
CAUTION!
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
is one that has never been programmed.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
General Information
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
subject to the following conditions:
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
• This device must accept any interference that may be additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
received, including interference that may cause unde- and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
sired operation.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to the following methods:
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
further information).
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
key is physically removed from the ignition.
position. Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
Tamper Alert
door, the alarm will sound.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Override
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
the far left detent position).
doors or open any door.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furCenter (EVIC) controls (if NOT equipped with a touchther information.
screen radio) or the Uconnect® radio (if equipped with a
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, touchscreen radio). For further information, refer to
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position). This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button pushes from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
Using The RKE Transmitter
(optional), power sliding doors, and Remote Start feature
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK, LOCK, and PANIC functions.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
customers preferences. For example, lights flash, or Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
sound horn on lock.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Inmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
the Key Fob removed.
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
its previous setting.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitUnlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
ing the following steps:
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm.
2. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the UNLOCK Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
button while still holding the LOCK button.
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
signal.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
10 seconds. Then, push the PANIC button while still
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
holding the LOCK button.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pushtronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Unignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforremoved.
mation.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
its previous setting.
following steps:
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit1. Perform this operation while standing outside the ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Using The Panic Alarm
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Push the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second console.
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
NOTE:
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) armed, using the RKE transmitter to open the power
liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle
noises of the system.
Security Alarm.
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is
running.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door —
If Equipped
Push the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pushing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock —
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is If Equipped
armed, pushing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vethe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmithicle Security Alarm.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door —
the current setting, proceed as follows:
If Equipped
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Push the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
following steps:
its previous setting.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitvehicle.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
2. Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the LOCK
Alarm.
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Programming Additional Transmitters
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by Push- contact your authorized dealer for details.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
2
Separating Transmitter Case
Inserting Key Into Transmitter Case Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
General Information
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
niently from outside the vehicle while still
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
maintaining security. The system has a range of
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
•
reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the •
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
2
RKE PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Ignition in Off position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secRemote Start Abort Message On Electronic
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
in the Remote Start mode.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position.
switch to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
NOTE:
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
in order to drive the vehicle.
unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob
• The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will
into the ignition switch, and turn it to the ON/RUN
display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to
position. Otherwise, the engine will shut off at the end of
ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor15-minute cycle.
mation Center (EVIC) in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Remote Start
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button 1 time or
occur:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• The hood is opened.
When To Reset Remote Start
• The hazard switch is pushed.
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without startcycle.
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
• The brake pedal is pushed.
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pushed, the vehicle must be reset. Insert the
Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to
the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
2
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Sliding Door Lock
WARNING!
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing 1 — Window Open/Close
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to 2 — Power Door Locks
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
door locks (lock or unlock).
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic VeWhen enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors Automatically at
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit —
15 mph (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On
If Equipped
Exit features in accordance with local laws.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
Entry feature.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
NOTE:
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
sponse time.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feahandles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
further information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the vehicles door’s automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
Transmitter In Vehicle
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the To Enter The Liftgate
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
present in the ignition.
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
NOTE: All doors will remain locked when the liftgate
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
release handle is pushed regardless of the driver’s door
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Switches
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
2
Power Window Lockout Switch
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
The front window switches may be equipped with an If Equipped
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the The front driver and front passenger switches may be
detent, release, and the window will go down automati- equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
cally.
window will go up automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) the first detent and release when you want the window to
after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening stop.
a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back steps after vehicle power is restored:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close window manually.
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power stopping several inches above the window sill.
accessory delay.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
activated the Power Window Lockout.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back- Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the anytime the vehicle is in motion.
hold open latch in order to close the door.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
lowing guidelines:
fuel door.
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
The power sliding door may be opened or
the downhill direction.
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
power
sliding
door handle will also power open or close
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
the
power
sliding
door.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
Push the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pushing the switch once
Power Sliding Door Switch
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pushed If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
reverse direction.
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked mode.
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding • If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
door switch is pushed. To close the door, wait until it
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
is fully open and then push the switch again.
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passengers.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatiNOTE:
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
clicking sound until the door has no further movement.
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no damage is
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
done to the power sliding door motor. The power sliding
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
door must be opened or closed manually.
pushed.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will Power Sliding Side Door Power Switch
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
entering or exiting the vehicle.
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or and handles may be overridden by pushing the OFF side
of the Power Switch located in the front overhead condisabled by performing the following procedure:
sole.
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-pillar
the engine).
trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, push the HAZ- the inside power sliding door handle.
ARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Power Switch
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Left Sliding Door
Liftgate
Right Sliding Door
Power Switch
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
Child Protection Door Lock
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from
the rear seats, push the “OFF” Master Lock Out
Switch located in the front overhead console, next to
the driver.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
1. Open the sliding side door.
overhead console, or the switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Prochild lock lever position.
tection Door Lock.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
2
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Push the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pushing the button located on the overhead console.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Left Sliding Door
Liftgate
Right Sliding Door
Power Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button, and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. liftgate is opening or closing.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
When the RKE transmitter button is pushed and the
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
position.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
times indicating power operation is in progress.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
• Seat Belt Systems
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
• Child Restraints
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
Important Safety Precautions
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltPlease pay close attention to the information in this
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Seat Belt Systems
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
between you and the door and you could be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be happen far away from home or on your own street.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
under ⬙If You Need Consumer Assistance.⬙
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
(BeltAlert)
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outThe outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
deactivating BeltAlert.
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Positioning The Lap Belt
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortcreate a fold that begins immediately above the latch
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
plate.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
the latch plate.
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
fully.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Seat Belt Extender
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
shoulder belt.
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
anchor point.
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu- Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
pant, it must be removed.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
WARNING!
the best way to keep the baby safe.
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) – If Equipped
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
worn snugly and positioned properly.
equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Front Passenger Seat
• ALR= Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
•
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo- This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- certain types of rear impacts.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
2
Review Table Below
A — Downward Movement
B — Rearward Movement
C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Steering Wheel and Column
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active •
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
•
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
•
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Advanced Front Air Bags
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Belt Pretenioners
system components:
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front
Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
WARNING!
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) — If Equipped
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
(SABICs) — If Equipped: Located above the side and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
Side Impacts
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approdetermining the appropriate response to impact events. priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover or all of the following may occur:
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricfaster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretention rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
experiences a near rollover event.
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inauthorized dealer immediately.
structions for cleaning.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- In the event of an impact, if the communication network
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
bags will not be in place to protect you.
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malprotection in a collision. The Occupant Re- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
with air bag system electrical components.
again after initial startup.
System Reset Procedure
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
crash investigation.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instrucinformation:
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriversand on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
childsafety-index-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a Belt
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rearward- equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
facing child restraints in this vehicle. If you must carry a (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion
child in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
seat should be moved to the full rearward position and not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
secure the child restraint using the seat belt and tether retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
anchorage.
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
WARNING!
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Front Passenger Seat
• ALR= Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webpulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the child restraint rearward and downward into the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
vehicle seat.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Anchorage
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
WARNING!
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
anchor.
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage
located behind the front passenger seatback, near the
floor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint,
always secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Front Passenger Seat Tether Strap Mounting
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
not interpreted as a problem.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate AREA.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .117
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .121
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .122
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .123
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .155
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .174
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .185
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .187
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped . .187
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .193
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .165 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .193
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .168
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .169
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .200
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .200
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .201
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .204
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .206
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .208
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .209
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .210
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .223
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
. . .225
. . .228
. . .228
. . .228
. . .229
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped . .231
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .231
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .234
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .238
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .241
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped.
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .242
. .244
. .248
. .250
. .250
. .251
. .252
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .253
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .262
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 䡵 RAM CARGO VAN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Ram Cargo Van Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .256 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped. . . .257 䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .271
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .272
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .278
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
mirror adjusts.
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
Outside Mirrors
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThese mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
rear
window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
mirror that you want to adjust.
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
will automatically unfold.
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect® customer support:
Illuminated Mirror
Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station. Uconnect® Phone operates no Uconnect® Phone Button
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
mand
button)
that
will enable you to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
access
the
system.
When
you
push
the button you will
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
hear
the
word
Uconnect®
followed
by a BEEP. The
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
beep is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.”
switch), if equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply push the Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a push of
button on the radio control head.
the Phone
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® weboptions at any prompt if you ask for help.
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give
the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone.
pairing instructions:
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
1. Activate the Bluetooth® on your mobile phone.
unique phone name.
button to begin.
2. Push the Phone
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
3. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say priority level between one and seven, with one being the
“Device Pairing.”
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
4. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
and follow the audible prompts.
Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect®
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifica- Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
tion Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit example, if priority three and priority five phones are
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the
initial pairing process.
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
want to call.
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
Uconnect® Phonebook.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
of certain radios.
appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
Transfer From Mobile Phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
“Call.”
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
phone is accessible.
by Saying a Name” section.
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
start the vehicle.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be downferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
phone connection.
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To add names to the Uconnect® phonebook using Voice After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
Commands:
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
main menu.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
“Phonebook New Entry.”
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
of long names helps the Voice Command and it is language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneNOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
book entry, if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Phonebook Edit.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the To delete a Uconnect® phonebook entry using Voice
Commands:
phonebook entry that you are editing.
button to begin.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, 1. Push the Phone
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
“Phonebook Delete.”
to the main menu.
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
number to a name entry that already exists in the
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from which you choose. To select one of the entries 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button
from the list, push the Voice Command
“Phonebook Erase All.”
while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
entry and say “Delete.”
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will 3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
deleted.
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE:
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current • Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries candeleted or edited.
not be deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
To hear a list of ALL names in the Uconnect® phonebook
To delete, or erase ALL Uconnect® phonebook entries using Voice Commands:
using Voice Command:
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
button during the playing of the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysCommand
desired name, and say “Call.”
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” call.
operations at this point.
button to accept the call.
• Push the Phone
4. The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the • To reject the call, push and hold the Phone
button
number designation you wish to call.
until you hear a single beep, indicating that the
• The selected number will be dialed.
incoming call was rejected.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Call” in this section.
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
button to place the current call on
• Push the Phone
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To put a call on hold:
1. Push the Phone
beep.
button until you hear a single
• This indicates that the call is on hold.
• To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Phone
Toggling Between Calls
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a single beep,
button and say “Dial” or push the Phone
push the Voice Command
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
indicating that the active and hold status of the two Phone
button until you hear a double beep, indicalls have switched. Only one call can be placed on cating that the two calls have been joined into one
hold at a time.
conference call.
Conference Call
Call Termination
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on To end a call in progress:
hold):
button.
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button until you hear a
1. Push and hold the Phone
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
joined into one conference call.
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active automatically.
Three-Way Calling
This is cell phone-dependent.
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a 2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Phone
second phone call, as described under “Making a
Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After
the second call has established, push and hold the
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
Call Continuation
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
using Voice Command:
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality availbutton to begin.
1. Push the Phone
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
“Redial.”
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
was dialed from your mobile phone.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32 name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
If you need roadside assistance:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your • Push the Phone
button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
for the mobile phone directly.
“Towing Assistance.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance phone number using the Voice Command system.
button and say “Setup,”
To do this, push the Phone
followed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted
say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services rePaging
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the sequence you wish
Command
to
enter,
followed
by the word “Send.” For example,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
if
required
to
enter
your PIN followed with a pound,
with Automated Systems.”
but(3 7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
ton and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.” Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
used for navigating through an automated customer Barge In — Overriding Prompts
service center menu structure, and to leave a number The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
on a pager.
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries as command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say,
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call could push the Voice Command
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
button and say listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
and then push the Voice Command
“Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name
or number and say the name of the phonebook entry Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phone will then Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
send the corresponding phone number associated from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
network configurations. This is normal.
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Phone And Network Status Indicators
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing mute the Uconnect® Phone:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions deThe Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
without terminating the call.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect® Phone
paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
versa using Voice Command:
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
1. Push the Voice Command
“Transfer Call.”
button and say • When prompted, say “List Phones.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
butbeing announced, push the Voice Command
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
ton
and
say
“Select”
or
“Delete.”
Also,
see
the
next
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
with one electronic device at a time.
“Delete” a paired phone.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another To delete mobile phones paired with the Uconnect®
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
phone using Voice Commands:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
button at any time 3. At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
• You can also push the Phone
while the list is being played, and then choose the
prompts.
phone that you wish to select.
button at any time
• You can also push the Phone
while
the
list
is
being
played,
and choose the
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
phone
you
wish
to
delete.
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
priority phone present in or near (approximately Phone
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Phone
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogrunning, all windows closed, and the blower fan
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
switched off.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
dures:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training
• From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from Reset
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
button for five seconds until the session begins,
or,
1. Push the Phone
button.
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
Training” command.
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The
You can either push the Uconnect® Phone button to
System will prompt you before resetting to factory
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
settings.
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Voice Command
• Smooth road surface
For best performance:
• Fully closed windows
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch • Dry weather condition
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
NOTE:
and the mirror.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
cents, the system may not always work for some.
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
• When navigating through an automated system such
you.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
during a Voice Command period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
Performance is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo- •
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
•
entries are not similar.
•
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
•
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
number combinations may not be supported.
Recent Calls
Far End Audio Performance
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook DownAudio quality is maximized under:
load,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
ing and Missed Calls.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Voice Text Reply
• Low Road Noise
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
• Smooth Road Surface
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Read Messages:
Send Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will a new message:
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
1. Push the Phone
button.
If you wish to hear the new message:
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button.
1. Push the Phone
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
3. Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
butTo send a message, push the Voice Command
you.
ton while the system is listing the message and say
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” “Send.” Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the
name or number of the person you wish to send the
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
message to.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
11. See you in 15 minutes.
1. Yes.
12. I am on my way.
2. No.
13. I’ll be late.
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L.
16. Can this wait?
6. Why?
17. Bye for now.
7. I love you.
18. When can we meet?
8. Call me.
19. Send number to call.
9. Call me later.
20. Start without me.
10. Thanks.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON/ Bluetooth® Communication Link
OFF
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
OFF will stop the system from announcing the new can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
incoming messages.
Bluetooth® ON mode.
To turn Voice Text Reply incoming announcement on or
Power-Up
off using Voice Command:
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
“Setup Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
1. Push the Phone
button.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Voice Commands
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Alternate (s)
Primary
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
Alternate (s)
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
Alternate (s)
pairing
phone book
Primary
record again
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
Alternate (s)
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
add or change commands. This will become helpful
once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you push the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists is set to low.
button, listen
options, push the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
for the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
Commands
the main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Universal commands are available at all times. Local com• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
mands are available if the supported radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice ComStreaming mode)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo Mode
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
recording, you may push the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by say- To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
ing one of the following commands:
• “Change to setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language French”
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language Spanish”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
• “Tutorial”
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
• “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
button first and wait for the beep
Command
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be rebefore speaking the “Barge In” commands.
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- SEATS
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
vehicle.
button, say “System
1. Push the Voice Command
WARNING!
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
the system and will improve recognition.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
Driver Power Seat Switch
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and 1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
Power Lumbar Switch
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Heated
Seats
—
If Equipped
the lumbar support.
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the
change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
second row passengers to operate the seats indepen- You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
side door handle trim panels.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Manual Seat Adjuster
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
have reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head If your vehicle is equipped with a second row bench seat,
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push the head restraints are not adjustable.
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
Head Restraints — Third Row
downward on the head restraint.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Second Row Stow ’n Go®
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
3
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
latch to open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
the outboard side of the seat.
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
Automatic Folding Seatback
Tumbled Second Row Seat
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy 6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
storage.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
To Unstow Second Row Seats
WARNING! (Continued)
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin
and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
Stow ’n Go® Seat — Folded And Latched Position
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
WARNING!
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could and seatback and tumble seat forward.
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
(Continued)
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
Raising The Seatback
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
Raising The Head Restraint
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
The second row Stow ’n Go® seats allow easy entry to the entry into the third row.
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Easy Entry Second Row
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position, bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Easy Entry
Easy Entry Lever
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Removal
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, push the removable for added cargo space.
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Second Row Bench Seat
Cross Beam For Seat Removal
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posiseat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
moved on its Easy Out® Rollers.
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
for occupant comfort.
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
and the vehicle is in PARK.
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
1 — Open To Normal
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
2 — Stow
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
of the head restraint.
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
NOTE:
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
seat to lower the seatback.
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “2”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
3
Stowed Third Row Seat
Release Strap “4”
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold Third Row Seats
WARNING! (Continued)
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
Tailgate Mode
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
(Continued)
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals (if
equipped), and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be proDriver Memory Switch
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN- Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
LOCK button is pressed.
transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of
the memory positions.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
following:
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferTransmitter To Memory” in this section.
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
pedals [if equipped] and radio station presets).
Transmitter To Memory
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
switch.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 4. Press and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
must select the “RKE Linked To Memory” feature
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
instrument cluster.
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
5. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
(EVIC) ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
transmitter within 10 seconds.
further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and
ing:
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile. in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK button on the you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rear1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
the pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
NOTE: Pressing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
the LOCK position.
memory mirror recall.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
Only)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
vehicle.
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) To open the hood, two latches must be released.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled through the programmable features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For further
information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Hood Release Lever
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the
safety catch downward while raising the hood at the
same time.
Hood Prop Rod
CAUTION!
Safety Lever Location
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
CAUTION! (Continued)
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
and the interior lights.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position.
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headTo activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interWhen your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authorized dealer.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles the driver’s door is opened.
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
further information.
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condiIf the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
will turn off in the normal manner.
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec- is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
Multifunction Lever
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
switch.
steering column.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
The multifunction lever controls the:
Turn Signal Warning
• Turn Signals
• Flash-To-Pass
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Lane Change Assist
• Headlight Beams Low/High
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. High/Low Beam Switch
Turn Signals
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifuncwill cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
remain on until the lever is released.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
Washer And Wiper Controls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
Rear Wiper And Washer
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermittent interval.
Mist Feature
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
single wiping cycle.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to feature.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operaVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandsensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
when not using the system.
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windvehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or
shield.
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru- The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
ment Panel” for further information.
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
from the driver to provide improved position with the (toward the front of the vehicle).
steering wheel.
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
The switch is located on the left side of the steering (toward the driver).
column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Adjustable Pedal Switch
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel You could lose control and have an accident. Always
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
information.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
CAUTION!
(40 km/h).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
right side of the steering wheel.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position.
Sound and Display is selected from the CustomerParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerspeed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inabove. The system will become active again if the vehicle strument Panel” for further information.
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense® Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
Park Assist System ON
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3
Park Assist System OFF
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the radio volume, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
REVERSE.
mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the radio volume
when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operFailure to do so can result in the system not working
ating properly.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- • Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
more, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
NOTE:
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING! (Continued)
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The programmable features of the Parkview®
Rear Backup Camera can be selected through the touchscreen. Refer to your “Uconnect® Supplement Manual”
for further information.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an
optional power liftgate switch.
Overhead Console
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
above except sunglass storage.
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK compartment.
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
3
Over Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Full Open Position
Conversation Mirror Position
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, door can only be closed.
positioned for conversation mirror use.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
3
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
Reading Lights
arrows.
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — LCD Screen*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
LCD Screen*
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
3
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT before 1995.
erase the channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Renot release the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
light in view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
follow all remaining steps.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Using HomeLink®
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
To operate, push and release the programmed
erase the channels.
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
also be used at any time.
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Security
follow these steps:
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
not release the button.
erased.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
Information Center (EVIC)
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel Outlets
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The knob and element must be used.
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
Removable Console Outlet
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Super Console Outlets
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC current
to AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel
immediately behind the second row left passenger seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation®3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet,
the inverter should automatically reset. If the power
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the
Power Inverter Outlet
inverter manually push the power inverter button OFF
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
panel below the climate controls.
power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch once. Push inverter.
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
Super Console — If Equipped
cupholders.
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
Rear Cupholders
Super Console Cupholders
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Interior Bottle Holders
On models equipped with premium center consoles, There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
there are four cupholders located on the top of the bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
console.
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Premium Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button,
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
automatically open.
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartments
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
Upper Compartment
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release that is part of the compartment handle.
handle.
Door Trim Panel Storage
Lower Glove Compartment
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Lower Compartment
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Umbrella Holder
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
the left front door entry scuff molding.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of
the second row seats. The area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
3
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Lock⬙ position
to allow greater access to the storage bin.
Storage Bin
CAUTION!
NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
CONSOLE FEATURES
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
WARNING!
the console base.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
easily pass through the first row to the second.
higher than the rear).
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are 2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Premium Console — If Equipped
is centered on the winch hole.
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down- sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the bin offers multiple configurations.
cover plug.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles
• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics and a convenient storage tray.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
3
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Console Position 1
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins
storage area below.
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2
Console Position 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Console
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
console.
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
Console Position 4
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Super Console — If Equipped
Front Lower Pass Through
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
and rear pull out drawer.
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
The super console contains a pass through storage area slides rearward.
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RAM CARGO VAN FEATURES
Ram Cargo Van Load Floor
The Ram Cargo Van receives a structural aluminum rear
load floor. Two load floor options are available, the
standard floor with a flat aluminum surface and non skid
strips or an optional deluxe floor with a flat aluminum
surface and non skid strips, through-the-floor access to
three storage bins and four load floor tie downs.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
3
Standard Load Floor (Rear View)
Standard Load Floor
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deluxe Load Floor Storage Bin Locations (Rear View)
Deluxe Load Floor Tie Down Locations (Rear View)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
time.
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
conditions.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
3
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Loosening Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Deployed Position
Stowed Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
crossbars into the deployed positions.
any two of the three deploy positions.
3
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
thumb screws completely.
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.
Tightening Crossbar
Stowing The Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are
identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the
crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely.
Rail Tie Loops
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
thumb screws as necessary.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
3
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .288
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .289
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .317
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped. . . .318
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .337
▫ Turn Menu Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .338
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .338
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .329
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .349
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .350
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .350
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .355
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .369
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .361
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .367
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™
Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video
Is Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .380
▫ Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .385
▫ Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .395
▫ Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Disc Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .389
▫ Product Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Shared Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Information Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .411
▫ Numeric Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .411
▫ Station List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . . . .417
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
Climate Controls
DVD – If Equipped
9 — Storage Bin
10 — Cup Holders
11 — Switch Bank
12 — Ignition Switch
13 — Hood Release
14 — Dimmer Switch
15 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to
2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes
This indicator will illuminate when the front at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
fog lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forThis indicator will illuminate when the park
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
lights or headlights are turned on.
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odomwheel) to access or reset the display.
eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
Message Display Area
driven.
6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in noFUSE
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
located in the instrument cluster.
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
If Equipped” in this section for further information.
fuse locations, refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
LoW tirE
Vehicle.”
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer disCHAngE OIL
play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
gASCAP
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a 12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
message. If the problem continues, the message will dependent upon your personal driving style.
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the
following steps.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features
a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do Information Center (EVIC)” in this section.
not start the engine).
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conyour authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
trol (ESC) is off.
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
12. Speedometer
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on Indicates vehicle speed.
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned 13. Fuel Door Reminder
to ON/RUN.
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
vehicle.
previously.
14. Fuel Gauge
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
15. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
16. Shift Lever Indicator
NOTE:
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiautomatic transmission.
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
the
driver
or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION! (Continued)
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
(Continued)
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
22. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
allowed to cool.
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vestarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop the hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To required and you may experience reduced performance,
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
towing up long grades on hot days, the autolight will come on when the ignition is first
matic transmission oil may become too hot.
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
When the transmission overheat warning light
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perforhave the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the mance until the automatic transmission cools down.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the Once the transmission has cooled down and the light
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high
speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
occur.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authostop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
• UP Button
Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menu items (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units, System Setup).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• DOWN Button
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu items.
• RIGHT Button
• BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button to scroll
back to a previous menu or sub-menu.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The RIGHT/SELECT button allows access to
information in EVIC submenus, selects some The EVIC display consists of three sections:
feature settings, and resets some EVIC features.
The EVIC prompts the driver when the RIGHT 1. The top line where compass direction and outside
temperature are displayed.
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the RIGHT button has been selected for 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
the desired submenu list, follow the EVIC
prompts to properly select the desired sub- 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odommenu EVIC features.
eter line.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Wrong Key
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
• Damaged Key
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Key not programmed
the following messages:
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in ignition
• Key Left Vehicle
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Key Not Detected
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Low Tire Pressure
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And Operating”)
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Remote start active — Key to Run
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Turn Signal On
•
• RKE Battery Low
•
• Service Keyless System
• Low Washer Fluid
• Oil Change Required
• Check Gascap
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Park Assist Disabled
Service Park Assist System
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed, both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- • Electronic Speed Control Ready
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
This light will turn on when the electronic
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
speed control is ready. For further information,
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warnrefer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Undering in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
If this message is present, see an authorized dealer.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This light will turn on when the electronic
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellspeed control is SET. For further information,
tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
and the gear selected is displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating.”
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the message continues to appear for more than three
days after tightening the gas cap, have the vehicle
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellserviced by an authorized service center immediately.
tales. These telltales include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Low Fuel Light
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L), this light will turn on and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Loose Gascap Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly telltales include:
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator • Door Ajar
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
the fuel filler cap properly.
more doors may be ajar.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
rized dealer.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
chime will sound when this light turns on.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
• Charging System Light
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
This light shows the status of the electrical chargthe system checked by an authorized dealer.
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis light indicates that the transmission fluid
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge aptemperature is running hot. This may occur
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
to cool.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
display in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Fuel Economy
within 10 seconds.
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions
display in the EVIC:
OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do • Distance To Empty (DTE)
not start the engine).
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG or L/100 km)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
within 10 seconds.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy Display
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel Vehicle Speed
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
button.
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
Distance To Empty (DTE)
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RIGHT arrow button. Push and release the RIGHT arrow Trip B
button to display the current speed in mph or km/h. Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will reset.
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
Elapsed Time
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
EVIC.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
Trip Info
or START position.
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
To Reset A Trip Function
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT
button. Push and release the UP/DOWN buttons to Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
highlight one of the following functions if you want to selected (highlighted). Push and hold the SELECT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
reset it:
Trip A
Tire PSI
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with
a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Units
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
button to scroll through the available information displays, then push and release SELECT to display any one
of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle status indicator.
Info” displays in the EVIC. Then, push and release the • Engine Hours
SELECT button. Push and release the UP and DOWN
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Messages #
Compass / Temperature Display
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pushing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Push
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pushing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display eight or fifteen compass
readings and the outside temperature.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed to Automatic Compass Calibration
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new,
display to the right of the odometer value.
the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
ating” for more information.
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 4. Push and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
the EVIC.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
Manual Compass Calibration
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
function normally.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: Compass Variance
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button until the
System Setup (Customer-Programmable Features)
menu is reached, then push and release the SELECT
button.
3. Push and releasethe DOWN button until “Calibrate
Compass” is displayed in the EVIC then push and
release the SELECT button.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
then press the SELECT button.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Turn Menu Off
Language
Push and release RIGHT arrow button to turn the menu When in this display you may select one of three lanoff.
guages for all display screens, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Push and
Customer-Programmable Features (System
release the UP or DOWN button while in this display and
Setup)
scroll through the language choices. Push and release the
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features SELECT button to select English, Spanish (Español), or
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is French (Français). Then, as you continue, the information
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning will display in the selected language.
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
Nav–Turn By Turn
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
Setup” from the main menu.
utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn, until the final destinaSetup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
tion is reached. To make your selection, push and release
push and release the SELECT button to enter the System
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
Setup sub-menu. Push and release the UP or DOWN
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
button to select a feature form the following choices:
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System —
If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Auto Lock Doors
When selected, all doors will lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make
your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow button
until a check-mark appears.
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, push and release the
Right arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press, you
must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on
the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, push and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is cycled to ON/RUN
position. To make your selection, push and release the
RKE Linked To Memory- If Equipped
RIGHT arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the memory seat, mirror, the feature showing the system has been activated or the
and radio settings will return to the memory set position check-mark is removed showing the system has been
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed. If deactivated.
this feature is not selected, then the memory seat, mirror,
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Horn With Remote Lock
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed.
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, push and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then push and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
When selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash
when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxireverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned Key-Off Power Delay
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
When this feature is selected, the power window
selection, push and release the SELECT button until a
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), DVD
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
setting has been selected.
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then push and release the SELECT button
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, push and release
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Illuminated Approach
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, push and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then push and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) — If
that the setting has been selected.
Equipped
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, push and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Flashers With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, push and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark is removed showing the system
has been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
To make your selection, push and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
showing the system has been activated, or the checkenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
mark is removed showing the system has been deactivehicle. To make your selection, push and release the
vated.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
deactivated.
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights,” “Blind Spot Alert
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Lights/CHM,” and “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
CHM” mode. In this mode, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Compass Variance
Spot Alert Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) Refer to “Compass/Temperature Display” in “Electronic
system is deactivated.
Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
To make your selection, push and release the SELECT Instrument Panel” for more information.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature,
showing the system has been activated, or the check- Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
mark is removed, showing the system has been deacti- IF EQUIPPED
vated.
Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for detailed operating instructions.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is Operating Instructions (Voice Command
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. System) — If Equipped
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
in the BSM not operating to specification.
If Equipped
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Press the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
radio frequency.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and push and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pushing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse)
button operates in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threemally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to in longer disc loading times.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Playback Of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
by the following:
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
increase with more files and folders
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is ACC position to operate the radio.
OFF).
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
stations without stopping, until you release it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
details.
SEEK Buttons
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
tures Of Your Vehicle.”
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
screen.
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
details.
radio frequency.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conBy pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threemally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to in longer disc loading times.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Playback Of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
by the following:
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
CD-R media
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will The folder list will time out after five seconds.
increase with more files and folders
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
ignition is OFF).
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastMP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
system to amplify the source and play through the coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
vehicle speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID)
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has Please have the following information available when
calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause Mode
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons
Satellite Antenna
Reception Quality
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
following reasons:
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
INFO Button
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five section between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
type.
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
to normal display).
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
direction of the arrows.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The Buttons 1 - 6
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
NOTE: This section is for Uconnect® 130/230 radios • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
only. For Uconnect® 430/430N, 730N, 731N, 735N or 431
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
touchscreen radio iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, refer
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
to the separate Supplement Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3
control is available only if equipped as an option with • Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
these radios.
plays media, but does not use the iPod® / MP3 control
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
feature to control the connected device.
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
located in the glove compartment.
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
USB Port
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Using This Feature
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
etc.) information on the radio display.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
USB device and display data:
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
previous track.
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
audio device).
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
holding the FF >> button.
the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
push the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec- • Push the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
onds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, push the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
list, or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
Track.⬙
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
device, or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise)
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
to get to the track faster.
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
audio device.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
USB device:
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device
• Preset 1 – Playlists
or external USB device.
List Or Browse Mode
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, push the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
the top line and the first item in that list on the second
line.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio
device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Selecting A Different Audio Device
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1.
Uconnect® phone system.
2.
Refer to the Uconnect® Radio Supplement for further
information on Bluetooth® connectivity.
3.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
Push the Phone
button to begin.
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the Next Track
button and say “Bluetooth
radio or push the VR
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on
Streaming Audio.”
the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next
Play Mode
music track on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
butsome devices require the music to be initiated on the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
ton
on
the
radio
and
say
“Previous
Track,”
to
jump
to
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
the
previous
music
track
on
your
cellular
phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Browse
Getting Started
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming • Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
playing will display info.
overhead console behind the screen(s).
Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Video Entertainment System (VES™)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
DVD player or a Blu-ray™ Disc Player. If equipped • The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants using either the touchscreen radio, the DVD or
with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the icon will be present
on the Player.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen System) by pushing the Power button, located on the far Blu-ray™ Disc Player
left, or by pushing the button on the Remote Control.
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu- To view a Blu-ray™ disc, insert the disc into the Bluray™ Disc is inserted into the VES™ player, the ray™ VES™ disc Player. Playback will begin automatiscreen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone cally after the Blu-ray™ is recognized by the disc drive. If
transmitters turn on and playback begins.
playback does not begin automatically after the disc is
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the inserted into the Blu-ray™ Player push the play button.
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If playback does not begin automatically after the disc is • Push popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and
inserted into Blu-ray™ VES™ disc Player follow these
options.
steps:
NOTE:
Using The Touchscreen Radio
• Due to the size of the content on a Blu-ray™ Disc, the
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate, then press the
disc may not start playing immediately.
Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen. If a chapter list
• Not all Blu-ray™, CD or DVD discs will automatically
appears on the right side of the screen, press the hide
restart from where you left off at when turned off.
list button on the touchscreen to display the Rear
Some discs will restart from the beginning, others will
VES™ control screen.
restart from where you left off at, and some will ask
you if you would like to continue or start from the
• Press the 1 button on the touchscreen to select an audio
beginning.
channel, then press the VES™ Disc button on the
touchscreen in the media column.
Play Video Games
Using The Remote Control
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then push the the second row seat.
source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation®3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
1 — HDMI Port
2 — Audio/Video In
3 — Power Outlet
4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
5 — Power Inverter
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES™ 2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
AUX 1, by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right butdisplay the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
tons or by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchpush ENTER on the Remote Control.
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select VES™ AUX1 Mode On The VES™ Screen
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
3. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and then press
either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES™ column (depending which AUX input is used). To exit press the back
arrow button at the top of the touchscreen.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES™
Column
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit Dual Video Screen
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen at the
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
top left of the left screen.
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray™
Discs.
1. Push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD button on the radio
faceplate (Touchscreen).
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is 3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA coldisplayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchumn. To exit press the back arrow button at the top left
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
of the screen.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player —
If Equipped
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab 1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
player automatically selects the appropriate mode
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
after the disc is recognized and starts playing the
button on the touchscreen.
DVD.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the ve- NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control funchicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the tion such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passenmission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
parking brake must be engaged.
switch is on Channel 1.
• Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control funcensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
on Channel 2.
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES™ DISC
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
on the right side of the screen.
ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select VES™ DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
DISC button on the touchscreen in the VES™ column.
To exit press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
at the top left of the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES™
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
NOTE:
NOTE: The Blu-ray™ Player has basic control functions
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab 2. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 1 for second row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headbutton on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
phone switch is on Channel 1.
button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not 3. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 2 for third row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headavailable in all states/provinces. If available, the vephone switch is on Channel 2.
hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transUsing The Remote Control
mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Blu-ray™ Player
parking brake must be engaged.
Remote Control.
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™
Player — If Equipped
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight Blu-ray™ by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
1. Insert the Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing up. The
repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
Blu-ray™ Player automatically selects the appropriate
OK on the Remote Control.
mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing
the Blu-ray™ Disc.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown • To view a Blu-ray™ Disc on the radio, push the
RADIO/MEDIA button on the radio faceplate, then
on the left side of the screen.
press the VES™ Disc tab button on the touchscreen
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
and then the VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen.
on the right side of the screen.
• Viewing a Blu-ray™ Disc on the Touchscreen radio
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
screen is not available in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
transmission the parking brake must be engaged.
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchPlaying
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the on the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
VES™ Disc button on the touchscreen in the VES™ (second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio.
column. To exit press the back arrow button at the top
left of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
If watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1 could be used for audio.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
4
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit
press the back arrow button at the top left of the left
screen.
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
and can be heard on Channel 2.
and video simultaneously.
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Entertainment System can play two separate discs by
Blu-ray™ Discs.
utilizing the touchscreen radio DVD player and Blu• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
ray™ Disc Player.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 • Audio can be heard through the headphones even
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
when the screen(s) are closed.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
Remote Control
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
Controls And Indicators
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of
the screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable 10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and pushmenu modes use to navigate in the menu.
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio. When listening to compress audio on a
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
previous station. In disc modes, push to advance to the
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
start of the current or previous audio track or video
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
7. POP UP/MENU – Push to return to the main menu of
Down selects the previous disc.
a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the
11. MUTE – Push to mute the headphone audio output
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
for the selected channel.
RANDOM for a CD).
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Push to slow playback of a
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
DVD disc. Push play (䉴) to resume normal play.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Push to display the current
status.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. MODE/SOURCE – Push to change the mode of the 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
this manual for details on changing modes.
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display 18. ENTER/OK – Push to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
is selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
navigate in the menu.
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control — If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Push to enter Source Selection screen.
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (second row). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (third row).
5. 䉴 – Push to navigate menus.
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone 6. SETUP – Push to access the Blu-ray™ Setup menu
screen. When a disc is loaded in the Blu-ray™ player
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected and the 13. 䉳䉳 – Push and release to jump to the previous audio
disc is stopped, push the SETUP button to access the
track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast rewind
Blu-ray™ Setup menu.
through the current audio track or video chapter.
– Mutes headphone audio.
7. 䉴䉴 – Push and release to jump to the next available 14.
audio track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast
15. BACK – Push to exit out of menus or return to source
forward through the current audio track or video
selection screen.
chapter.
16. 䉲 – Push to navigate menus.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
17. OK – Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Push to access Blu-ray™ Disc
18. 䉳 – Push to navigate menus.
features.
10. POPUP/MENU – Push to access the Blu-ray™ main 19. 䉱 – Push to navigate menus.
menu when in Blu-ray™ or DVD mode. Push to start
Remote Control Storage
Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartmodes.
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
11. KEYPAD – Push to navigate chapters or titles.
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, push the Video Lock button on the DVD
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
VES™ Remote Control Storage
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
VES™ Headphones
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
3 — Channel Selection Switch
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down 1 — Volume Control
4 — Power Indicator
position and that the channel is not muted and the 2 — Power Button
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
4
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
Blu-ray™ VES™ Headphones
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
1 — Power Button
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
switch is in the same position as the headphone
Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
selector switch.
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to
select the new mode.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferBACK button on the remote control.
able.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
according to the polarity diagram shown.
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option,
will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired®
reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product
with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE
SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFEC-
TIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING
ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
or email [email protected]
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the ability to control the following video modes:
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
Up/Down.
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT). while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
long as it is not in shared mode.
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Mode Display
Numeric Keypad Menu
Information Mode Video Screen Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Channel 1 Mode
Channel 1 Shared Status
Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
Channel 2 Mode
Channel 2 Shared Status
Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7 — Channel 1 ENTER/OK
Button Action
8 — Channel 2 ENTER/OK
Button Action
9 — Clock
10 — Video Lock
11 — Not Available / Error
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s OK
button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite Station List Menu
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote con- station, push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
trol’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat tune to that station. To jump through the list more
these steps until all digits are entered.
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and the screen.
push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Menu
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play
and Random play.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
Disc Menu For CDs
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if push the remote control’s power button to turn audio on.
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged
batteries are installed in the headphones.
player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
Disc Formats
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
screen closed:
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
the next available audio mode without using the
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
format files
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is • Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on
the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on,
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of the playing the
following types of discs (12 cm diameter):
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files.
• For DivX files, only DivX Home Theater Profile Ver.3.0
is supported.
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• Any file that is copy protected will not play. The
Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically skip the file and
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
begin playing the next available file.
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
• Other compression formats such as Xvid and RMP4
profile 3.0
will not play. The Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically
Compressed Video Files (DivX)
skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of playing DivX files • For the lack of indexes DivX files, “Resume Play,” “Fast
from a CD disc (usually a CD-R, CD-RW) or a DVD disc
Forward” and “Fast Rewind” cannot be supported.
(usually a DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD+RW).
• DivX Home Theater Profile 3.0 requires:
• The Blu-Ray™ Player always uses the file extension
• Maximum resolution 720 x 480 @ 30fps or 720 x 576
to determine the video format, so DivX files must
@ 25fps
always end with the extension “.div”, “divx” or “.avi.”
• Minimum resolution 16 x 16
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
• Maximum frame rate for progressive source 30
frames per second
• Maximum field rate for interlaced source 60 fields
per second
• To change the current chapter, use the remote control’s
or Blu-Ray™ Player’s “Fast Forward” button to advance to the next chapter, or the “Fast Rewind” button
to return to the start of the current or previous chapter.
DVD/Blu-ray™/BD Region Codes
The DVD player/Blu-ray™ Player and many DVD/Bluray™ Discs are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the
region code for the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc does not match
the region code for the player, the disc will stop playing
and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi - channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA or AAC (Blu-ray™ Disc
Player only) files. The player will also play DVD-Video
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVDROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Mixed disc which contains ⬙DivX⬙ will be priority
played on Blu-ray™ Disc Player.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
closed are playable.
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- software publisher for more information about burning
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so playable discs.
each track number is unique.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Other formats (such as HFS, or others) are not sup- disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
ported.
DVD player.
• Blu-ray™ Disc Player can extend 2,000 files and 255
folders.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Player (if equipped) is capable of
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Winbegin playing the next available file.
dows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a
CD-R or CD-RW).
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
player will automatically skip the file and begin playdetermine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
ing the next available file.
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
⬙.WMA.⬙ AAC files must always end with the extenfixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps
sion ⬙aac⬙ or ⬙AAC.⬙ To prevent incorrect playback, do
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
not use these extensions for any other types of files.
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
sample rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• To change the current file, use the DVD player’s 䉱
• For Blu-ray™ files, only version 1.0 / 1.1 / 2.2 / 2.3
button to advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to
and 2.4 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title,
return to the start of the current or previous file.
album, etc.) are supported.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC)
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To change the current directory, use the remote con- The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (49° C). The Blu-ray™ Player may
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
shut down when the vehicle’s interior temperature exDisc Errors
ceeds 140° F (60° C). When this occurs, the DVD/BluIf the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ ray™ Player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is the display until a safe temperature is reached. This
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD/
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ Blu-ray™ Player.
message.
The Blu-ray™ player may require additional reading
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or time during extremely cold weather conditions. When
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD this occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by warm, then insert disc into player.
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Display
Other Language Setup
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. These languages are selected using a special fourdigit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then push the remote control ENTER/OK button.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then push the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
DVD Player Language Menu
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, push the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
Rating And Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
them where lower numbers are designated for all audi• When the entire four-digit code is entered, push the ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language audiences.
code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
If the digits are visible after this step, then the lan- to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
guage code is valid.
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenlanguage codes, please contact the dealer where the ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
vehicle was purchased.
Language
Dutch
German
Portuguese
Code
2311
1304
2519
Language
French
Italian
Spanish
Code
1517
1819
1418
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
4
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, push the
follow these additional instructions:
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
tons, select the Rating tab.
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
enter the new password.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
value for the current digit, and then push the remote
change.
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons, select the new rating level, and then push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
change.
follow these additional instructions:
DVD Player Level Menu
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Product Agreement
Software
This product contains software licensed under GNU
General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code
of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source
Code from the following website at no charge.
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/MP_632_34W821
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and
without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source
Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERcomplying with the user agreements that accompany
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONeach Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to
SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
any inquiries regarding the source code.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology
is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under
license from Verance Corporation and is protected by
U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide
Patents
patents issued and pending as well as copyright and
trade secret protection for certain aspects of such techCinavia Notice
nology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohib- is prohibited.
ited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX
video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain
• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. information on how to complete your registration.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are tradeSymbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS, marks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
used under license.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Trademark
• Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the logos are trademarks
of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
affiliates.
4
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pushing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset push-button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, after the current track begins to play.
depending on which mode you are in.
If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op- second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
eration in each mode.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
Radio Operation
function in this mode.
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
take the following precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. before considering disc player service.
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
ing the disc.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and If Equipped
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
following conditions:
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
conditions.
the party responsible for compliance could void the
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat• This device may not cause harmful interference.
ing, Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming
• This device must accept any interference received, from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
including interference that may cause undesired op- The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
eration.
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operathroughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the tion. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
instrument panel, below the radio.
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in 1. Left Front Temperature Control
Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temof the rear floor outlets.
perature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower
knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off position into the
“REAR” control position.
3. Front Blower Control
Manual Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
7. Front Defrost Mode
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left
Air is directed through the windshield and side
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
rear cabin.
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
5. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for Mix and Defrost, even if the A/C button is not pushed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
warmer temperature settings.
To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
6. Mix Mode
necessary.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side 8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
Push this button to turn on the rear window
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
equipped).
An indicator in the button will illuminate
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pushing the rear window defroster switch a
second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
Push this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. An indicator light will illuminate when
you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the
Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the Recirculation button is pushed when the
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Push and release to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make lower than expected, check the front of the A/C conthe inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumuExtended use of this mode is not recommended.
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
maximum defogging, select the outside air position. 11. Floor Mode Button
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation
button is pushed and the mode control is set to
Panel, the A/C will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
Economy Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temany conditions other than full cold or full hot), between perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The Floor modes.
warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives
Max A/C
improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
13. Panel Mode Button
For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
mode buttons at the same time.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted for Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
seat passengers.
upper outlets.
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
center of the vehicle.
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
REAR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 — Rear Blower
2 — Rear Temperature
3 — Rear Mode
4 — Rear Climate Control Lock
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
CAUTION! (Continued)
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be
controlled by the rear mode control knob.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headcold air, and clockwise for heated air.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and Floor Mode
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
Front ATC Panel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
5. Rear Temperature Control Display
Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning This display shows the current Rear Temperature Control
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. settings.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch 6. Front Auto Indicator
into manual mode.
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
2. Blower Control Display
7. Auto Indicator
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
8. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
front seat occupant.
4. Mode Display
9. Front Defrost Button
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
illuminates when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode. The blower will
engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected.
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
13. Rear Lock
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Push and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls.
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
14. Auto Temperature Control Button
11. Rear Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
Provides toggle operation between front control screen the amount of air recirculation automatically. Push and
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
modes.
12. Rear Window Defrost
15. Climate Control OFF Button
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica- Push and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. If the
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window control is OFF, push any button to turn the control ON.
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
16. Blower Control
20. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in- Provides the driver with independent temperature concreases as you move the control to the right from the trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will lower button for cooler temperature settings.
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
17. Mode Control Button
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
Push and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi- to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
ATC to switch into manual mode.
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C
18. Recirculation Control Button
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
Push and release to change the current setting, the deactivate the A/C system.
indicator illuminates when ON.
19. SYNC Button
Push and release to control the temperature setting for all
three zones from the driver temperature control.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out
any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
weather.
to prevent fogging of the windows.
NOTE:
• If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on • If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system
is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will
the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
flash three times to indicate Recirculation mode is not
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
allowed.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
needed.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Recirculation
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
Recirculation Control Button
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. An indicator
defogging, select the outside air position.
light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
• To prevent fogging, when the Recirculation button is 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experipushed and the mode control is set to Panel, the A/C
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
will engage automatically.
system to function automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbNOTE:
ing the mode control selection.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
Automatic Operation
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
possible.
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
and front passenger. The system will then automaticustomer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Eleccally regulate the amount of airflow.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
Programmable Features” in this Section.
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger,
and rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage • To return to Front screen, push ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
1. Mode Display
• Push ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func- This display shows the current Mode selection.
tions now operate rear system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
2. Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
to one side will shut off the airflow.
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pushing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed
2 — Rear Temperature
3 — Rear Mode
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
1. Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customercounterclockwise to AUTO.
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
Rear Blower Control
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
(Continued)
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Mode Control
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
• Bi-Level Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
floor outlets.
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
front ATC panel.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headWhen rear controls are locked by the front system, the liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob • Floor Mode
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
Air comes from the floor outlets.
ignored.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Operating Tips
Winter Operation
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforsuggested control settings for various weather condi- mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentions.
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Summer Operation
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
The engine cooling system must be protected with a coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- during Winter months is not recommended, because it
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating. may cause window fogging.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Vacation/Storage
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
A/C Air Filter
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in “Maintaining
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .444
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .442
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .482
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .487
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .463
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .490
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .500
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .501 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .502
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .517
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .513
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .520 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .537
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . .538
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN Mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will If The Engine Fails To Start
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
WARNING!
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
(Steps 1–3 above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push be repeated.
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
After Starting
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
Key Ignition Park Interlock
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park InterON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
pedal must be pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi- vehicle control systems will change the following:
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi- • The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
tions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
later.
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
ECON mode is engaged.
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Shift Lever
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in the
DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiNOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children) and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you shift the
transmission into 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will
not shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any To exit ERS mode, simply hold the shift lever to the right
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
position, the transmission will operate automatically, cluster.
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
WARNING!
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
available gear.
personal injury.
Transmission Gear
Position Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–6
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
perature.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
WARNING!
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demon- (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Traction
Overdrive.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs be observed:
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
the front (driving) wheels.
slushy.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
Shallow Standing Water
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/ RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inYour vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
debris, or panic stops.
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and You may experience the following when the brake system
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the goes into anti-lock:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
braking capability during emergency braking maneushort time after the stop).
vers.
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• Brake pedal pulsations.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
of the stop.
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
soon as possible.
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that Traction Control System (TCS)
service is required. However, the conventional brake
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
Warning Light” is not on.
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide ensystem should be serviced as soon as possible to restore hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
(Continued)
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
mode of operation.
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
WARNING!
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature deESC Partial Off
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
Off” switch.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sysexcept for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
tem is reduced.
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manageESC On
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acESC OFF Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenmalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this secwhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
that caused the ESC activation.
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- 3. Apply the parking brake.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- 4. Start the engine.
tion.
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
following steps:
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower switch
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
bank below the climate controls) four times within
90 seconds.
20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
5
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the touchscreen radio. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Maximum Load
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 45 —
— Maximum Pressure
Code (TIN)
Panel” for further information.
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
Temperature Grades
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5
R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
(Continued)
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
At least once a month:
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidejudgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
wall.
may look properly inflated even when they are underCheck tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated.
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
temperature changes.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
first opportunity.
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
(Continued)
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
WARNING! (Continued)
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- Tread Wear Indicators
ping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
You could lose control and have a collision resulting equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
in serious injury or death.
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little and Speed Symbol of a tire.
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Replacement Tires
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for those of the original wheels.
WARNING!
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, a 225/65R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure requirements found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The system will automatically update and the “Tire
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
threshold for any reason, including low temperature the updated tire pressures have been received.
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn information.
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
to be turned off.
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitorto turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
ing Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized service center to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • TPMS Telltale Warning Light
the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure Warnings
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levwill illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
Module.
will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar). the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
TPMS sensors.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
mation.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a Vehicles With Compact Spare
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
pressure in the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnwarning limit in any of the four active road tires.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to
displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
receive this information.
Light” will turn on.
Premium System — If Equipped
• After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimLight” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem
remain on solid.
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
solid.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following components:
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • Receiver Module
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire • Four TPMS Sensors
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
displaying tire pressures
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
The system will automatically update, the graphic disTPMS Low Pressure Warnings
play of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumi- “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
“LOW TIRE” message and a graphic display of the
information.
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. An ⬙Inflate
Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS- • Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
the wheels or wheel housings.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Sensor(s) is not being received.
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
TPMS sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following scenarios:
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Compact Spare
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
pressure in the compact spare tire.
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnsolid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
“LOW TIRE” message will be displayed, a chime will
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing • Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message in
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
the graphic display.
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
any of the four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 FUEL REQUIREMENTS
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
3.6L Engine
to receive this information.
General Information
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
• This device must accept any interference received, provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these enincluding interference that may cause undesired op- gines.
eration.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing licenses:
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
United States
MRXMERCTX1
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiCanada
2546A-MERCTX1
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxywide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties genates such as Ethanol.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomCAUTION!
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
Reformulated Gasoline
blends may result in starting and drivability probMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe- cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumicifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
prove air quality.
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoProblems that result from using gasoline containing
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proMethanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
fuel system components.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
engine controller memory.
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle LimMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
ited Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Operate in a lean mode.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• Poor engine performance.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents
or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you
should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 General Information
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are
common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel
powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
When switching fuel types:
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
NOTE:
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With Chrysler Specification MS-6395. It is recommended that
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirerough idle following start up may be experienced even ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
if the above recommendations are followed, especially contains additional requirements, developed during exwhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the Maintenance
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by about 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the fuel door.
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
ADDING FUEL
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
NOTE:
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys- The label contains the following information:
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- • Name of manufacturer
tion.
• Month and year of manufacture
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
dealer as soon as possible.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label • Type of Vehicle
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rim Size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles listed.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Inflation Pressure
rear GAWR.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
Tire Size
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
evenly over the front and rear axles.
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and and GAWRs.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Common Towing Definitions
supported by the scale.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
you in understanding the following information:
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
TRAILER TOWING
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Trailer Sway Control
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
information.
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fricWARNING!
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
Frontal Area
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the trailers.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
Frontal Area
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
3.6L/Automatic
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue
Weight
360 lbs (163 kg)
335 lbs (152 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
by 100 lbs (45 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and your bumper or trailer hitch.
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of Consider the following items when computing the
many trailer collisions.
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
train components, the following guidelines are recom- never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended.
Towing Requirements
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
personal injury.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .541
▫ Securing The Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut. . . . . . .545 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .548
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
Spare Tire Removal
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
Jack And Tool Location
Spare Tire Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
6
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart- Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
ment.
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart- access the winch drive nut.
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
Drive Nut Access
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
6
Assembled T-handle
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
Pulling Spare Tire
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
the vehicle.
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
6
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
slippery areas.
release it from the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Removing Wheel Spacer
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Jacking Instructions
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
WARNING!
tire, block the left rear wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
vehicle.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that compact spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, compact spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
compact spare tire, its use, and operation.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
flange of the vehicle body.
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
6
Jack Locations
Rear Jacking Locations
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Jack Engaged
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
Front Jack Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Front Jack Engaged
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
the vehicle.
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
6
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the compact spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the compact spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
spare.
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow
the deflated tire in the compact spare tire location.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
as possible.
proper wheel lug nut torque.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
WARNING!
mechanism clicks at least three times.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instructions on assembling the T-handle.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
repaired or replaced immediately.
back in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
6
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha- winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack power tools is not recommended and can damage the
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out winch.
from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
WARNING!
the vehicle.
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the compact spare
tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through
the center of the wheel and compact spare tire/cover
assembly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and
engage the compact spare tire cover on the opposite
side.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assembly.
Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could
result in loss of the compact spare tire and cover
assembly, which will cause vehicle damage and may
cause loss of vehicle control and serious personal
injury.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size deflated tire, or any
other full-size tire, as the tire may not be held
securely. Vehicle damage may result.
6
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
seated against the wheel.
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
lug nuts.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
CAUTION!
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
in the reverse sequence:
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
and the fuel injection system.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the disWARNING!
charged battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri- 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
parts.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
discharged
battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located near the top
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel).
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
ALL MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .576
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . .608
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .623
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . .610
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . .625
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .621
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
For states that require an Inspection and MainteIf the problem persists, the message will appear the next
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
system is ready for testing.
MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
to the I/M station.
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to Change Engine Oil
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain tion.
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change indipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these months, whichever occurs first.
engines.
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter
are followed.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
Materials Added To Engine Oil
at every engine oil change.
Synthetic Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
maintenance intervals.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- Maintenance-Free Battery
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
A/C Air Filter Replacement
lower the door.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt seconds to flush out any residual water.
from a dry windshield.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
WARNING!
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Adding Washer Fluid
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning Coolant Checks
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
Cooling System
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) only by an
WARNING!
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature down the face of the condenser.
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubswitch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, leaks.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that
needed to be added to the system please contact your
meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
local authorized dealer.
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C)
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomare anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING! (Continued)
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezshould be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
ing.
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to maintenance intervals.
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
WARNING!
components.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans- Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geodamage.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
CAUTION!
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underFluid And Filter Changes
body protection.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
maintenance intervals.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid resistance built into your vehicle.
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non- If Equipped
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR® Chrome Cleaner • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
(Part#04318013) or equivalent.
with a clean, dry towel.
• For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
(Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
CAUTION!
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro- • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
protectants on Stain Repel products.
equivalent is recommended.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, mended for leather upholstery.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
use protectants or other products which may cause cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
restore the low glare surface.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaning Interior Trim
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva- liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiArmor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
clean vinyl upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
CAUTION!
• Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• Do not use power washers to clean the inside of the
vehicle, plastic parts can be permanently damaged
and the amount of water can cause problems with
the electrical components of your vehicle.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Cleaning Headlights
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
age than glass headlights.
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Removal
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
at one edge to ease removal.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
J1
J2
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
7
Description
Power Folding Seat
Power Liftgate Module
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J3
J4
J5
J6
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
J7
30 Amp Pink
–
J8
J9
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
–
–
J10
30 Amp Pink
–
J11
30 Amp Pink
–
J12
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Rear Door Module
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control
System
Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex
Fuel – If Equipped
Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve –
If Equipped
Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft
Module – If Equipped
HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Cavity
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
Rear Window Defogger
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Sunroof Module
Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
Front Fog Lamps
Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump Motor
Trailer Tow
Inverter
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M6
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
M7
–
20 Amp Yellow
M8
M9
M10
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
M11
M12
M13
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
M14
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor,
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel or
with Console Rear)
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) –
Center Seat or with Console Rear
Front Heated Seat – If Equipped
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite
Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal
Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming
Video Module – If Equipped
Climate Control System
Amplifier/Radio
Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module,
Multi-Function Control Switch – If Equipped
Trailer Tow – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Cavity
M15
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
M16
–
10 Amp Red
M17
M18
M19
M20
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue
M21
M22
M23
M24
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
Description
Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, MultiFunction Control Switch, Tire Pressure
Monitor, Glow Plug Module – If Equipped
Airbag Module/Occupant
Classification Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Powertrain
Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Column Module,
Switch Steering Wheel
Powertrain
Horn
Horn
Rear Wiper
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M25
M26
M27
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – If Equipped
Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
Wireless Control Module,
Keyless Entry Module
Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
Occupant Classification Module
Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror
Back-Up Lamps
Airbag Module, THATCHUM – If Equipped
Powertrain
Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module,
Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera,
Door Lamps, Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan Diesel – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
Cavity
M35
M36
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
M37
–
10 Amp Red
M38
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with
Console Center)
Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp,
Fuel Pump
Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/
Unlock Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
VEHICLE STORAGE
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of comYou may do the following:
pressor damage when the system is started again.
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Center & Rear Dome Lamp
Center & Rear Reading Lamps
Front Door Courtesy Lamp
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster Lamps
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
Bulb Number
578
578
578
578
PC74
578
PC579
194
6501966
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp
Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker, Park/Turn Signal
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Backup Lamp
License
NOTE: All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved and should not be used for replacement.
Bulb Number
H11LL
PSX24W
3757A or PY27/7W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
3157
168
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red
housing.
lock tab forward.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the
bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, squeeze the two tabs on the side of the
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
bulb socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.
housing.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
lamp until it locks into place.
dam.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side
to disengage the two ball studs.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
NOTE:
License Lamp
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to bar and above the license plate.
scratch the paint.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and
dislodging them separately.
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly. 2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the 3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
lamp assembly.
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons
76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20,
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
API Certified).
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS.90032.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and
Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use Only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend
MOPAR® ATF+4® Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
8
630 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will Instrument Panel” for further information.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interscheduled maintenance.
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change whichever comes first.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Severe Duty All Models
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check engine oil level.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 631
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Required Maintenance Intervals.
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
page for the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
632 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 633
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
634 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 635
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .640
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .643
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .640
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .644
9
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .645
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
640 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (866) 726–4636
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 641
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
642 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 643
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR® PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
644 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 645
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
646 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
648 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .583
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control. . . . . . . . . .412
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
INDEX 649
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .420
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
10
650 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .289
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .97
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
INDEX 651
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.411
.494
.318
.319
.319
.316
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.355
.355
.314
.261
.261
.228
.265
.641
.596
.592
.594
.624
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.592
.596
.593
.597
.597
.596
.596
.593
.602
.250
.639
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
10
652 INDEX
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .314
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .362
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.516
.445
.244
.119
.463
.466
.212
.467
.303
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.540
.543
.562
.540
.577
. . . . .583
. . . . .442
. . . . .105
INDEX 653
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.583
.432
.583
.583
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
10
654 INDEX
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.518
.518
.518
.440
.261
.624
.110
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.601
.599
.592
.459
.625
.289
.621
.174
.566
.511
.519
Additives . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.514
.512
.314
.445
.512
.289
.289
.511
.514
.512
.511
.511
.314
.624
.516
.519
.314
.314
.609
INDEX 655
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Gauges
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
. . .456
. . .540
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.620
.607
.201
.204
.620
.200
.200
.170
.120
.412
.442
.203
.472
10
656 INDEX
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
.527 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .205
.232 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
.197 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
.260
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .
Programming Additional Transmitters
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.17
.17
.15
.39
.20
.16
.12
.15
INDEX 657
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .470
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .289
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
10
658 INDEX
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .289
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .289
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.630
.289
.644
.228
.193
.120
.512
.316
.117
.118
.119
.119
.120
.193
.119
.117
.122
. . . . . .314
INDEX 659
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
10
660 INDEX
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .483
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .244
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .596
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
INDEX 661
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .409
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Seat Belt
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .73
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .73
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
10
662 INDEX
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .289
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
INDEX 663
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .409
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.289
.208
.420
.208
.482
.475
.110
10
664 INDEX
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.497
.487
.500
.543
.494
.487
.490
.488
.543
.497
.482
.502
.289
.645
.490
.498
.501
.475
.477
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.492
.544
.496
.532
.496
.475
.529
.454
.524
.138
.569
.528
.537
.528
.138
.537
.455
.465
.465
INDEX 665
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .28
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .232
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . .
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . .
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . .
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . .
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .355
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.142
.125
.133
.137
. . . . . . . .143
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.337
.332
.329
.334
. . . . . . . .350
. . . . . . . .338
. . . . . . . .346
10
666 INDEX
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .355
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Operation . . . . . . . .
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recognition System (VR) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.157
.155
.161
.155
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .289
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
INDEX 667
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .412
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
15MZZ-126-AA
15MZZ-126-AC
First
Third Edition
Edition
Printed
Printed in
in U.S.A.
U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement